FREE SOFTWARE DOWNLOADS

Go
  • Beta
  • Archived

Here are your search results:

Spider V Remote      

Spider V Remote

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 89 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Helix Driver2

This driver adds support for Apple Silicon systems (M1 and greater). This driver is for macOS 11 Big Sur (Intel/Apple Silicon) and greater.

For macOS Catalina or earlier, please use driver 1.1.0.

This driver provides sample rate conversion for 44.1kHz, 88.2kHz and 96kHz operation. For 48kHz operation, we recommend using the Mac class compliant driver.

Installation of this driver will require lowering your system security settings. Please click here for installation instructions.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

130_Splash.jpg

POD Go 1.30 (released October 5, 2021) includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users of POD Go and POD Go Wireless.

 

How do I update to 1.30?

  1. Connect POD Go/POD Go Wireless to your computer and launch POD Go Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including backing everything up to your computer, updating POD Go Edit, and updating the firmware.

 

I updated but why don't I see [Model X]?

POD Go Edit can't magically see new models added to your POD Go hardware; you MUST update POD Go Edit to 1.30 as well. Here's a link:

 

 

My POD Go is at version 1.XX. Can I go straight to 1.30?

Yes.

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. We STRONGLY recommend performing a factory reset AFTER UPDATING your POD Go firmware to 1.30 and THEN RESTORING YOUR BACKUP. (Backing up is part of the update process). Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS A FACTORY RESET WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  1. While holding footswitches C and D, turn on POD Go/POD Go Wireless.

 

New Amp in 1.30

 

311_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII (Dirty Channel). NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 1.30

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch.
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion, basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity) TIP: Assign a second stomp switch to toggle between a lower Decay value and Infinity. Label it "ForEVER ever?"
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 1.30

User Model Defaults

1.30 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default, so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. Editing/saving a User Default does not affect any existing instances of the model currently in use in your presets.

  1. From Edit view, choose any effect, amp, or cab and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From POD Go Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default."

130_UMD.jpg

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

POD Go 1.30 adds the ability to customize the LED colors and onscreen labeling of stomp switches.

  1. Press <PAGE and PAGE> to open the main MENU and then press Knob 1 (Bypass/Control).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the desired block and then turn Knob 2 (Switch[Controller]) to select FS1 ~ FS6.
  3. Press ACTION and then Knob 3 (Customize).
  1. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 4 (Character) to rename the Stomp switch. Turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose the desired color for the switch.
  2. Press Knob 5 (OK) when finished.

130_CustomStomp1.jpg

 

130_CustomStomp2.jpg

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Press Knob 5 (Rename Snapshot).
  3. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 4 (Character) to rename the Snapshot. Turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose the desired color for the switch.
  4. Press Knob 5 (OK) when finished.

130_CustomSnap1.jpg

 

130_CustomSnap2.jpg

 

On Play view, when in Snapshot footswitch mode, custom snapshot names appear in the boxes with smaller camera icons:

130_CustomSnap3.jpg

 

 

Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Volume Knob

Prior to 1.30, POD Go’s Volume Knob only controlled the Main Outs (and Phones out, of course). Now you can choose whether it controls the Main Outs, Amp Out, or both. IMPORTANT: When connecting POD Go's AMP OUT to the input of a guitar or bass amp, we strongly recommend leaving Global Settings > In/Outs > Volume Knob to "Main Outs," as turning the Volume knob with any other setting will be like adding many boost pedals or attenuators between POD Go and your amp; that is, it'll probably sound totally wrong. Only set this to "Amp Out" or "Both" when using a full-range, flat response (FRFR) speaker, studio monitor, or similar playback system.

 

Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS7/8 Function

Prior to 1.30, POD Go’s Footswitch 7/8 jack supported an expression pedal or two additional stomp switches. You can now assign them to Bank Up/Down, Preset Up/Down, or Snapshot Up/Down, so you can leave POD Go in Stomp mode (with all 6 stomps) and still navigate presets and snapshots from external switches.

 

Wireless Transmitter Updating via POD Go Edit

POD Go Wireless can now update a connected G10T or G10T II via POD Go Edit.

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.30

  • Changing Wah or Volume/Pan models could could inadvertently change the block's bypass state–FIXED
  • In some cases, the 6 Switch Looper would not reflect the proper states in Play View—FIXED
  • In rare cases, some graphic anomalies could appear on the LCD—FIXED
  • If a Modulation > Deluxe Phaser (set to 2 Stage) was moved, it could freeze POD Go—FIXED
  • If an Amp > Agua 51 block is set with Bass to 0.0 and Mid to 10.0, it could cease processing audio—FIXED
  • In rare cases, repeated, incessant reordering of blocks via POD Go Edit could cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • In certain cases, exiting footswitch modes could cause the display to inadvertently change from Play view to Edit view—FIXED
  • In certain circumstances, loading a preset with specific Delay > Legacy models could cause them to behave as Authentic instead of Transparent—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 1.30

  • If many parameters are assigned to the expression pedal, POD Go Edit may fail to reflect some parameters' correct Min and Max values
  • In some cases, loading a .WAV file into the currently active IR slot can cause the block to cease passing audio until a different IR location is selected
  • When Modulation > Chorus' WavShape is set to "Saw Up" or "Saw Down," the block collapses the signal to mono when after the Amp block
  • A minor thump may be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Dhyana Drive, or Tycoctavia Fuzz
  • In rare cases, if Delay > Glitch Delay is in the active preset, performing a firmware update can cause POD Go to freeze on the splash screen
  • POD Go Edit—After copying/pasting an Input or Output block “Failed to undo edit buffer: …" can appear
  • POD GO Edit—Adjusting some parameters can fail to display the preset name in a dirty state (italics)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

130_Splash.jpg

POD Go 1.30 (released October 5, 2021) includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users of POD Go and POD Go Wireless.

 

How do I update to 1.30?

  1. Connect POD Go/POD Go Wireless to your computer and launch POD Go Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including backing everything up to your computer, updating POD Go Edit, and updating the firmware.

 

I updated but why don't I see [Model X]?

POD Go Edit can't magically see new models added to your POD Go hardware; you MUST update POD Go Edit to 1.30 as well. Here's a link:

 

 

My POD Go is at version 1.XX. Can I go straight to 1.30?

Yes.

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. We STRONGLY recommend performing a factory reset AFTER UPDATING your POD Go firmware to 1.30 and THEN RESTORING YOUR BACKUP. (Backing up is part of the update process). Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS A FACTORY RESET WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  1. While holding footswitches C and D, turn on POD Go/POD Go Wireless.

 

New Amp in 1.30

 

311_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII (Dirty Channel). NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 1.30

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch.
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion, basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity) TIP: Assign a second stomp switch to toggle between a lower Decay value and Infinity. Label it "ForEVER ever?"
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 1.30

User Model Defaults

1.30 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default, so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. Editing/saving a User Default does not affect any existing instances of the model currently in use in your presets.

  1. From Edit view, choose any effect, amp, or cab and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From POD Go Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default."

130_UMD.jpg

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

POD Go 1.30 adds the ability to customize the LED colors and onscreen labeling of stomp switches.

  1. Press <PAGE and PAGE> to open the main MENU and then press Knob 1 (Bypass/Control).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the desired block and then turn Knob 2 (Switch[Controller]) to select FS1 ~ FS6.
  3. Press ACTION and then Knob 3 (Customize).
  1. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 4 (Character) to rename the Stomp switch. Turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose the desired color for the switch.
  2. Press Knob 5 (OK) when finished.

130_CustomStomp1.jpg

 

130_CustomStomp2.jpg

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Press Knob 5 (Rename Snapshot).
  3. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 4 (Character) to rename the Snapshot. Turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose the desired color for the switch.
  4. Press Knob 5 (OK) when finished.

130_CustomSnap1.jpg

 

130_CustomSnap2.jpg

 

On Play view, when in Snapshot footswitch mode, custom snapshot names appear in the boxes with smaller camera icons:

130_CustomSnap3.jpg

 

 

Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Volume Knob

Prior to 1.30, POD Go’s Volume Knob only controlled the Main Outs (and Phones out, of course). Now you can choose whether it controls the Main Outs, Amp Out, or both. IMPORTANT: When connecting POD Go's AMP OUT to the input of a guitar or bass amp, we strongly recommend leaving Global Settings > In/Outs > Volume Knob to "Main Outs," as turning the Volume knob with any other setting will be like adding many boost pedals or attenuators between POD Go and your amp; that is, it'll probably sound totally wrong. Only set this to "Amp Out" or "Both" when using a full-range, flat response (FRFR) speaker, studio monitor, or similar playback system.

 

Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS7/8 Function

Prior to 1.30, POD Go’s Footswitch 7/8 jack supported an expression pedal or two additional stomp switches. You can now assign them to Bank Up/Down, Preset Up/Down, or Snapshot Up/Down, so you can leave POD Go in Stomp mode (with all 6 stomps) and still navigate presets and snapshots from external switches.

 

Wireless Transmitter Updating via POD Go Edit

POD Go Wireless can now update a connected G10T or G10T II via POD Go Edit.

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.30

  • Changing Wah or Volume/Pan models could could inadvertently change the block's bypass state–FIXED
  • In some cases, the 6 Switch Looper would not reflect the proper states in Play View—FIXED
  • In rare cases, some graphic anomalies could appear on the LCD—FIXED
  • If a Modulation > Deluxe Phaser (set to 2 Stage) was moved, it could freeze POD Go—FIXED
  • If an Amp > Agua 51 block is set with Bass to 0.0 and Mid to 10.0, it could cease processing audio—FIXED
  • In rare cases, repeated, incessant reordering of blocks via POD Go Edit could cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • In certain cases, exiting footswitch modes could cause the display to inadvertently change from Play view to Edit view—FIXED
  • In certain circumstances, loading a preset with specific Delay > Legacy models could cause them to behave as Authentic instead of Transparent—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 1.30

  • If many parameters are assigned to the expression pedal, POD Go Edit may fail to reflect some parameters' correct Min and Max values
  • In some cases, loading a .WAV file into the currently active IR slot can cause the block to cease passing audio until a different IR location is selected
  • When Modulation > Chorus' WavShape is set to "Saw Up" or "Saw Down," the block collapses the signal to mono when after the Amp block
  • A minor thump may be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Dhyana Drive, or Tycoctavia Fuzz
  • In rare cases, if Delay > Glitch Delay is in the active preset, performing a firmware update can cause POD Go to freeze on the splash screen
  • POD Go Edit—After copying/pasting an Input or Output block “Failed to undo edit buffer: …" can appear
  • POD GO Edit—Adjusting some parameters can fail to display the preset name in a dirty state (italics)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 19 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

130_Splash.jpg

POD Go 1.30 (released October 5, 2021) includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users of POD Go and POD Go Wireless.

 

How do I update to 1.30?

  1. Connect POD Go/POD Go Wireless to your computer and launch POD Go Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including backing everything up to your computer, updating POD Go Edit, and updating the firmware.

 

I updated but why don't I see [Model X]?

POD Go Edit can't magically see new models added to your POD Go hardware; you MUST update POD Go Edit to 1.30 as well. Here's a link:

 

 

My POD Go is at version 1.XX. Can I go straight to 1.30?

Yes.

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. We STRONGLY recommend performing a factory reset AFTER UPDATING your POD Go firmware to 1.30 and THEN RESTORING YOUR BACKUP. (Backing up is part of the update process). Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS A FACTORY RESET WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  1. While holding footswitches C and D, turn on POD Go/POD Go Wireless.

 

New Amp in 1.30

 

311_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII (Dirty Channel). NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 1.30

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch.
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion, basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity) TIP: Assign a second stomp switch to toggle between a lower Decay value and Infinity. Label it "ForEVER ever?"
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 1.30

User Model Defaults

1.30 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default, so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. Editing/saving a User Default does not affect any existing instances of the model currently in use in your presets.

  1. From Edit view, choose any effect, amp, or cab and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From POD Go Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default."

130_UMD.jpg

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

POD Go 1.30 adds the ability to customize the LED colors and onscreen labeling of stomp switches.

  1. Press <PAGE and PAGE> to open the main MENU and then press Knob 1 (Bypass/Control).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the desired block and then turn Knob 2 (Switch[Controller]) to select FS1 ~ FS6.
  3. Press ACTION and then Knob 3 (Customize).
  1. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 4 (Character) to rename the Stomp switch. Turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose the desired color for the switch.
  2. Press Knob 5 (OK) when finished.

130_CustomStomp1.jpg

 

130_CustomStomp2.jpg

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Press Knob 5 (Rename Snapshot).
  3. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 4 (Character) to rename the Snapshot. Turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose the desired color for the switch.
  4. Press Knob 5 (OK) when finished.

130_CustomSnap1.jpg

 

130_CustomSnap2.jpg

 

On Play view, when in Snapshot footswitch mode, custom snapshot names appear in the boxes with smaller camera icons:

130_CustomSnap3.jpg

 

 

Global Settings > Ins/Outs > Volume Knob

Prior to 1.30, POD Go’s Volume Knob only controlled the Main Outs (and Phones out, of course). Now you can choose whether it controls the Main Outs, Amp Out, or both. IMPORTANT: When connecting POD Go's AMP OUT to the input of a guitar or bass amp, we strongly recommend leaving Global Settings > In/Outs > Volume Knob to "Main Outs," as turning the Volume knob with any other setting will be like adding many boost pedals or attenuators between POD Go and your amp; that is, it'll probably sound totally wrong. Only set this to "Amp Out" or "Both" when using a full-range, flat response (FRFR) speaker, studio monitor, or similar playback system.

 

Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS7/8 Function

Prior to 1.30, POD Go’s Footswitch 7/8 jack supported an expression pedal or two additional stomp switches. You can now assign them to Bank Up/Down, Preset Up/Down, or Snapshot Up/Down, so you can leave POD Go in Stomp mode (with all 6 stomps) and still navigate presets and snapshots from external switches.

 

Wireless Transmitter Updating via POD Go Edit

POD Go Wireless can now update a connected G10T or G10T II via POD Go Edit.

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.30

  • Changing Wah or Volume/Pan models could could inadvertently change the block's bypass state–FIXED
  • In some cases, the 6 Switch Looper would not reflect the proper states in Play View—FIXED
  • In rare cases, some graphic anomalies could appear on the LCD—FIXED
  • If a Modulation > Deluxe Phaser (set to 2 Stage) was moved, it could freeze POD Go—FIXED
  • If an Amp > Agua 51 block is set with Bass to 0.0 and Mid to 10.0, it could cease processing audio—FIXED
  • In rare cases, repeated, incessant reordering of blocks via POD Go Edit could cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • In certain cases, exiting footswitch modes could cause the display to inadvertently change from Play view to Edit view—FIXED
  • In certain circumstances, loading a preset with specific Delay > Legacy models could cause them to behave as Authentic instead of Transparent—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 1.30

  • If many parameters are assigned to the expression pedal, POD Go Edit may fail to reflect some parameters' correct Min and Max values
  • In some cases, loading a .WAV file into the currently active IR slot can cause the block to cease passing audio until a different IR location is selected
  • When Modulation > Chorus' WavShape is set to "Saw Up" or "Saw Down," the block collapses the signal to mono when after the Amp block
  • A minor thump may be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Dhyana Drive, or Tycoctavia Fuzz
  • In rare cases, if Delay > Glitch Delay is in the active preset, performing a firmware update can cause POD Go to freeze on the splash screen
  • POD Go Edit—After copying/pasting an Input or Output block “Failed to undo edit buffer: …" can appear
  • POD GO Edit—Adjusting some parameters can fail to display the preset name in a dirty state (italics)

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 64 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 POD Go Driver2

This driver adds support for Apple Silicon systems (M1 and greater). This driver is for macOS 11 Big Sur (Intel/Apple Silicon) and greater.

For macOS Catalina or earlier, please use driver 1.0.1

This driver provides sample rate conversion for 44.1kHz, 88.2kHz and 96kHz operation. For 48kHz operation, we recommend using the Mac class compliant driver.

Installation of this driver will require lowering your system security settings. Please click here for installation instructions.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Big Sur
( 904 KB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

POD Go 1.22 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 1.22 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • POD Go Edit: Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • POD Go Edit : Acoustic Sim block added to signal flow did not display 'x' icon to delete.

 

  • POD Go Edit: Tapping tempo from for an extended period of time could eventually freeze POD Go.

 

  • Guitar In Pad global setting was not recalled across power cycles.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 2 MB )
Get Download

Line 6 Updater      

Line 6 Updater

This version of Line 6 Updater provides additional support for POD Go Wireless and Relay G10T/G10TII.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 49 MB )
Get Download

Line 6 Updater      

Line 6 Updater

This version of Line 6 Updater provides additional support for POD Go Wireless and Relay G10T/G10TII.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 69 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

POD Go 1.22 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 1.22 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • POD Go Edit: Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • POD Go Edit : Acoustic Sim block added to signal flow did not display 'x' icon to delete.

 

  • POD Go Edit: Tapping tempo from for an extended period of time could eventually freeze POD Go.

 

  • Guitar In Pad global setting was not recalled across power cycles.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 19 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

POD Go 1.22 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 1.22 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • POD Go Edit: Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • POD Go Edit : Acoustic Sim block added to signal flow did not display 'x' icon to delete.

 

  • POD Go Edit: Tapping tempo from for an extended period of time could eventually freeze POD Go.

 

  • Guitar In Pad global setting was not recalled across power cycles.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 64 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

Helix Native 3.11 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 3.11 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 45 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

HX Edit 3.11 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 3.11 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • HX Stomp/HX Stomp XL: Renamed snapshots would not appear in HX Edit's command center window.

 

  • HX Stomp's Input block could show as "None" on rare occasions after restoring from a backup.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 27 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

Helix Native 3.11 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 3.11 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 36 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

HX Edit 3.11 contains several stability and performance improvements as well as bug fixes. Updating is highly recommended.

Please click here or copy/paste this link into your browser to view the 3.11 Release Notes in their entirety.

Bug Fixes:

  • Improved stability and performance on macOS Big Sur.

 

  • HX Stomp/HX Stomp XL: Renamed snapshots would not appear in HX Edit's command center window.

 

  • HX Stomp's Input block could show as "None" on rare occasions after restoring from a backup.

 

  • Other minor improvements and bug fixes.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 88 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Bug Fixes in 3.11

  • HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display "MULTIPLE [X]" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXED
  • Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXED
  • HX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXED
  • Receiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED

Please click here to see the release notes in their entirety.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Bug Fixes in 3.11

  • HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display "MULTIPLE [X]" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXED
  • Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXED
  • HX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXED
  • Receiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED

Please click here to see the release notes in their entirety.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Bug Fixes in 3.11

  • HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display "MULTIPLE [X]" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXED
  • Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXED
  • HX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXED
  • Receiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED

Please click here to see the release notes in their entirety.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Bug Fixes in 3.11

  • HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display "MULTIPLE [X]" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXED
  • Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXED
  • HX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXED
  • Receiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED

Please click here to see the release notes in their entirety.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Bug Fixes in 3.11

  • HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display "MULTIPLE [X]" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXED
  • Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXED
  • HX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXED
  • Receiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED

Please click here to see the release notes in their entirety.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Bug Fixes in 3.11

  • HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL only—If a custom label is not assigned, tapping a stomp switch with multiple assignments would display "MULTIPLE [X]" instead of displaying its assignments—FIXED
  • Stomp mode footswitches would not follow the Global Settings > Displays > LED Ring Brightness value—FIXED
  • HX Stomp XL only—The colors for Distortion and Reverb boxes on Play view were reversed—FIXED
  • Receiving a MIDI CC67 could cause Helix LT to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, a MIDI snapshot (CC69) message could fail to be recognized if sent immediately after a PC message—FIXED

Please click here to see the release notes in their entirety.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 88 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 27 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 45 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 36 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

 

Helix/HX 3.10 includes a new amp, new effects, new features, improvements, and bug fixes and is recommended for all users.

 

How do I update to 3.10?

Did you happen to update HX Edit to 3.01 (released on Feb 2, 2021)? If so, just connect Helix/HX to your computer via USB and launch HX Edit. The software will walk you through the entire procedure, including updating HX Edit 3.01 to 3.10, and backing everything up to your computer.

 

What if I didn't update HX Edit to 3.01? What if I don't remember? What's going on? Where am I?

That's fine, just make ABSOLUTELY SURE you install HX Edit 3.10 BEFORE you install 3.10 firmware and make ABSOLUTELY SURE you back everything up! Here's the link:

 

Anything else I should know?

Yes. If you run into any odd behavior, before running to the internet to complain, perform a factory reset and restore your backup. (Backing up is part of the update process). This should solve any issues. Here's how to perform a factory reset. IMPORTANT: MAKE SURE YOU HAVE A BACKUP FIRST, AS THIS WILL ERASE ALL YOUR WORK!

  • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 9 & 10 (bottom row, 2 middle switches), turn on Helix Floor/LT
  • Helix Rack: While holding knobs 5 & 6 (2 furthest right knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack
  • HX Effects: While holding footswitches 6 & TAP (2 furthest right switches on the bottom row), turn on HX Effects
  • HX Stomp: While holding footswitches 2 & 3, turn on HX Stomp
  • HX Stomp XL: While holding footswitches C & D, turn on HX Stomp

 

New Amp in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_AmpMandarin.jpg

  • Mandarin Rocker, based on* the Orange® Rockerverb 100 MKIII. NOTE: We decided to slightly alter the model so that at lower settings, the Drive knob's taper exhibits a smoother transition into distortion.

 

New Effects in 3.10

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

 

310_FX.jpg

  • Distortion > Ratatouille Dist (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1984 Pro Co RAT. Turns out our Vermin Dist model was broken. Sorry! We were going to replace it completely but a bunch of people had presets with the old version. On top of that, we found out our RAT's LM308 chip had crapped out since we modeled it last so we decided to get it into perfect working order and start from scratch
    • Gain—Sets the amount of distortion
    • Filter—Sets the amount of high cut (low pass) filter applied to the distortion; basically letting more treble through (lower values) or filtering it out (higher values)
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
  • Modulation > Retro Reel (Mono), Line 6 Original effect that simulates playing a signal back from an analog tape machine. This signal can be distorted, filtered to sound older or more lo-fi, and modulated with wow and flutter. TIP: Helix Native users should definitely try Retro Reel on all sorts of tracks—vocals, drums, keyboards, strings, busses, you name it.
    • Wow Fluttr—Determines how much warbly tape sound is heard
    • Saturation—Adds analog tape saturation and at high enough settings, distortion. At lower settings, it's great for simply warming up a tone
    • Low Cut—Determines the frequency of the Low Cut (High Pass) filter. At higher settings, can provide a lo-fi effect
    • High Cut—Determines the frequency of the High Cut (Low Pass) filter. At lower settings, can provide the natural high-end roll-off of old tape
    • Tape Speed—Changes both the rate of the modulation applied by the Wow Fluttr control and the filtering response of the analog tape  emulation
    • Level—Sets the overall level of the block
    • Texture—Adjusts the amount of the NAB tape EQ in the simulated tape path. When Saturation is set to 0.0, the texture is invisible. When Saturation is turned up, the texture will affect the tightness (or looseness) of the distortion
  • Delay > Euclidean Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original delay based on Euclidean algorithms. Creates multitap patterns by setting the length of the pattern (Steps) and the number of taps (Fill) in the pattern. The Euclidean algorithm spaces taps as evenly as possible throughout the pattern, resulting in rhythms from traditional to highly complex. Settle in because this one'll require diagrams and charts and whatnot. TIP: Add two Euclidean Delays in parallel (with different settings) for interesting polyrhythm patterns. When using a stereo playback system, try panning Paths A and B in the Mixer to L100 and R100.
    • Step Time—Sets the time between steps. The total delay time is Time x Steps, so [Time: 1/16 x Steps: 8] is a 1/2-note. Press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • FeedbackControls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence. If you want to hear all fills in the sequence only once, set to 0%
    • Steps—Determines the number of steps in the sequence (1-16; see diagram below)
    • Fill—The number of active taps, whose spacing is set by Euclidean algorithms (1-16, see diagram below). If Fill is higher than Steps, the extra taps are ignored
    • Rotate—Rotates all fills forward by the same amount (0-15; see diagram below). Used If you like the sound of a repeat pattern but want the fills and gaps shifted forward
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (high pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (low pass) filter to the fills, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

310_EuclideanCircles.jpg

I was told there'd be no math!

Sorry. If you'd like to read more about Euclidean rhythms, check this out: https://splice.com/blog/euclidean-rhythms/ Or if you'd like to know more about Euclidean math, see ya' in a semester or two! https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Euclidean_algorithm

  • Reverb > Dynamic Hall (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original hall reverb
    • Decay—Sets the decay of the reverb (0.1 sec ~ 45.0 sec, or Infinity)
    • Predelay—Determines the amount of delay heard before the signal enters the hall. Can sometimes result in more definition between the dry and effected signals
    • Room Size—Sets the size of the hall (10, 20, or 30 meters). NOTE: This parameter actually changes the algorithm so you'll hear a small bump when changing it. Therefore, we don't recommend assigning Room Size to snapshots or other controllers
    • Diffusion—Sets the amount of smearing between discrete echoes, sometimes resulting in a softer effected signal
    • Damping—Determines the frequency above which the reverb will be absorbed. For example, if your hall is full of people wearing fake ocelot jumpsuits, more high frequencies would be absorbed than if the room were empty
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Motion—Sets the amount of randomization, which can be helpful to minimize any metallic artifacts common in extremely static reverbs. At higher values, can impart a bit of modulation to the effected signal
    • Low Freq—Sets the frequency below which the Low Gain parameter is applied
    • Low Gain—Sets the reverb time for frequencies below the Low Freq value. Values below 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay faster than the treble frequencies; values above 0.0dB mean the bass frequencies decay slower than the treble frequencies
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Reverb > Hot Springs (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original spring reverb
    • Dwell—Adjusts the strength of the signal sent into the spring tank. Higher values result in a longer decay
    • Spring Count—Sets how many springs are in the tank (1, 2, or 3, and numerous values in between)
    • Drip—Adjusts the intensity of the spring reverb, or how much "ploink" you might hear
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the reverb, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • MixControls the wet/dry mix of the reverb. When set to 0%, no reverb is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
    • TrailsWhen on, reverb decay continues to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

New Features in 3.10

Increased Oversampling Throughout

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Oversampling has been increased across the board, resulting in higher fidelity, fewer aliasing artifacts, and smoother decay trails, especially when running multiple distortion stages or with higher gain tones. Many people might not notice a difference, but those highly sensitive to aliasing will appreciate 3.0's smoother response. Amp and effects models have been optimized to accommodate these improvements without increasing DSP usage.

 

Customizable Stomp Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

 

As long as something is assigned to a stomp switch (bypass one or more blocks, toggle parameter Min/Max, or Command Center command), switches in Stomp Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors. This is especially helpful when multiple blocks, controls, or commands are assigned to the same switch; it doesn't have to read "MULTIPLE (X)" anymore.

  1. Touch a stomp mode footswitch to select it and from either the Bypass Assign or Command Center menu, press PAGE> and then Customize.
  2. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  3. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch reflects its assignment (Delays are green, Filters are purple, Commands are white, etc.)
  4. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Customizable Snapshot Switches

HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  1. From Play View, press the Upper Knob to open the Preset List.
  2. Turn Knob 2 (Snapshot) to select the snapshot you want to rename and press ACTION.
  3. Press Rename Snapshot.
  4. Use the Upper Knob and Knob 2 (Character) to name the stomp.
  5. Press PAGE> and turn Knob 3 (Switch LED) to choose a custom color. When set to "Auto" (the default), the switch is white
  6. When finished, press <PAGE and Knob 3 (OK).

 

Tuner Trails

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

The Tuner screen has a new "Trails" parameter. When set to "On," delay repeats and reverbs' decay continue to ring out and even the Looper keeps running when the tuner is engaged. No more awkward "everyone's staring at me because my B string went wonky."

 

Expanded 3.0 Models

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

3.0 added a boatload of new creative effects and after collecting feedback from users, we've added new parameters to some of them to help expand their flexibility and fun factor. IMPORTANT! These new parameters won't show up in your existing presets; they'll only appear if you remove the block (or change the model and reload it). Also, if you've saved any of the following models' defaults, they will need to be re-tweaked and saved again.

  • Delay > Poly Sustain
    • Auto EQ Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the sustained signal. If the sustained signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. The higher the value, the more EQ is applied at the shift end points; when set to 0.0, no compensation EQ is applied
    • Operation—Determines what happens to your signal when Poly Sustain is turned on (remember, it's bypassed by default)
      • "Mute All"—When Poly Sustain is on, THE ENTIRE PATH IS MUTED
      • "Dry Kill"—When Poly Sustain is on, only the sustained signal is heard. TIP: With Poly Sustain on a parallel path, assign a second stomp switch to toggle between Mute All and Dry Kill. This lets you leave the block enabled and bring the sustained signal in and out by switching between the two values
      • "Normal" (default)—When Poly Sustain is on, both the dry and sustained signals are heard. This is how Poly Sustain behaved in Firmware 3.0; that is, you're able to jam on top of the sustained drone
  • Delay > Glitch Delay
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of repeats changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other repeats, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Low CutApplies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal below a certain frequency
    • High CutApplies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the slices, letting you remove the effected signal above a certain frequency
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper
    • Pitch—Determines the likelihood of your slices changing pitch, based on the new Interval 1 and Interval 2 settings (In 3.0, the repeats were fixed to an octave below and above). Was called "Octaves" in 3.0
    • Interval 1—Sets the pitch of some slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
    • Interval 2—Sets the pitch of other slices, the likelihood of which is determined by the Pitch parameter (from an octave down to an octave up)
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String
    • PluckType—Optimizes the 12 String emulation for specific types of playing styles. We've also improved the onset detection and 12 String now uses less DSP

 

Instant Command Wait Time

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

On the Command Center page, Instant commands (lightning bolt icon) have a new "Wait Time" parameter, letting you delay certain events by up to 1000ms. This is to help Helix/HX control older MIDI gear that may behave incorrectly when receiving multiple commands very close together. Unless you specifically need to delay a message, leave this set to "0 ms."

 

New and Improved MIDI Implementation

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL

Switches in Snapshot Footswitch Mode can now have custom labels and colors.

  • MIDI Snapshot changes on CC69 that are received during preset loads will now be buffered and executed once the preset load is finished. This means that you can send a MIDI Snapshot change immediately after a PC message to effectively load a preset with a different Snapshot than it was saved with.
  • Bank/Preset/Snapshot Up and Down messages how properly work via incoming FS1/FS7 emulation MIDI messages
  • FS1/2/3 emulation MIDI messages can now be momentary for HX Stomp (values 64-127=footswitch press; values 0-63=footswitch release)
  • Also, footswitch emulation MIDI messages now work while in preset or snapshot footswitch mode
  • New MIDI message (Helix Floor/Rack/LT/HX Stomp XL): CC71 engages the MODE switch
  • New MIDI message: CC 72, value 64-127 increments preset, value 0-63 decrements preset
  • New MIDI message (Helix LT, HX Stomp, HX Stomp XL): CC 73 toggles between Play and Edit views

 

Other Changes and Improvements in 3.10

  • HX Edit now adds support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Helix Floor and Rack/Control only: The scribble strip above FS6 (MODE) now displays which mode is currently active—Preset or Stomp. You can still hold FS6 to engage hands-free Pedal Edit mode
  • On the Controller Assign page, turning Knob 2 (Controller) no longer resets the Min Value and Max Value

 

Bug Fixes in 3.10

  • Pressing the Bank Down switch would skip banks in certain situations–FIXED
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop—FIXED
  • The tuner screen and gain reduction meters could sometimes appear laggy—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 3.10

  • Helix Native's performance can be laggy in new M1-based Apple computers
  • As Delay > Poly Sustain, Delay > Glitch Delay, Pitch/Synth > 12 String, and Looper > Shuffling Looper models have been updated, any existing user defaults for these models will need to be re-tweaked and saved again

  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected

  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp only—Sending more than one MIDI program change messages one after another can sometimes cause HX Edit to lose connection

  • Helix Floor/Rack/LT only—Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

  • Helix LT only—FS1 and FS7 do not transmit Command Center messages

  • HX Stomp and XL only—Quickly scrolling across the signal flow view immediately after booting can sometimes cause HX Stomp/XL to freeze

  • HX Stomp and XL only—In rare cases, after restoring a 3.01 backup, parallel presets' blocks may be shifted one position to the right

  • Impulse responses with names consisting of more than 54 characters cannot be copied or exported

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Production firmware release for the Relay G10TII transmitter.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Windows 8, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 30 KB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

121_Splash.jpg

 

POD Go 1.21 includes new amps, new cabs, new effects, and bug fixes and is recommended for all POD Go and POD Go Wireless users.

 

How do I update to 1.21?

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.21

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.21:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go/POD Go Wireless

Shut down any programs that use audio or connect to your POD Go device, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.

Disable the sleep timer on your computer. The update will fail if your computer goes to sleep during the process.

If you are using a laptop, plug it in, or ensure it has enough battery life to complete the update without shutting down.

 

  1. Connect POD Go or POD Go Wireless to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch POD Go Edit 1.21.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then click "Check for Updates".
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Please keep POD GO Edit in focus throughout the entire update. Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.
  8. Click "Back to POD Go Edit".

 

New Amps in 1.21

Amps.jpg

 

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

 

New Cabs in 1.21

Cabs.jpg

 

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

 

New Effects in 1.21

POD121_Effects.jpg

 

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive, based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw, based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz, inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz, based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz, based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate, based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim, based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Includes an extra Shimmer parameter that imparts some motion to the harmonics, reminiscent of how a string's vibration tends to affect the other strings. Just like the original, works best with single-coil pickups. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Delay > Glitch Delay, Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real-time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backward
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

Changes and Improvements in 1.21

  • Support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Audio communication is now more stable when using the class-compliant driver in macOS
  • EQ > Low/High Shelf's High Freq parameter now goes down to 400Hz

 

Bug Fixes in 1.21

  • With an external expression pedal connected, EXP 1 and EXP 2 could become swapped under certain conditions—FIXED
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > Snapshot Mode is set to "Auto Return" and Up/Down Switches is set to "Presets," pressing Up or Down would not correctly exit Snapshot mode
  • In rare cases, attempting to swap footswitches (by holding two stomps) while the model list or preset list was open could result in a freeze–FIXED
  • In rare cases, audio could be lost after updating via Line 6 Updater. Updating via POD Go Edit would not exhibit this behavior—FIXED
  • In some cases, after exiting 6 Switch Looper mode, stomp switch LEDs could fail to light properly until pressed—FIXED
  • In rare cases, snapshot selection could not properly recall a block's bypass/enable state—FIXED
  • Dynamics > LA Studio Comp's level could drop if placed after an input boost, which is then toggled on and off—FIXED
  • In some cases, None and Looper categories in the model list could fail to update the display—FIXED
  • In some cases, pressing the expression pedal toe switch could not properly bypass/enable assigned blocks—FIXED
  • With very low Delay settings, Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch and Dual Pitch could exhibit metallic artifacts—FIXED
  • A minor pop could be heard when selecting different IRs while signal was present—FIXED
  • In rare cases, restoring from a backup could sometimes cause the unit to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, selecting a preset would not properly recall the active expression pedal (EXP 1 or EXP 2)—FIXED
  • Importing IRs immediately after launching POD Go Edit could sometimes result in an error message—FIXED
  • Transmitting MIDI CC60 or CC61 to control POD Go's looper could sometimes cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • When Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS Auto Assign was set to "Off," selecting a different effect category could sometimes cause the footswitch to display the previous category's color—FIXED
  • Various graphical glitches—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 1.21

  • Global Settings > In/Outs > Guitar In Pad is not recalled after turning POD Go off and back on again. Unfortunately, this will need to be manually  toggled after each power cycle before it begins working again
  • Importing a .WAV file into the current empty slot of an Impulse Response block can cause POD Go to stop passing audio. WORKAROUND: Select a different IR and then reselect the new one; audio should resume
  • Under certain circumstances, tapping a tempo for an extended period of time in POD GO Edit may result in POD Go freezing.

 

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 2 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

121_Splash.jpg

 

POD Go 1.21 includes new amps, new cabs, new effects, and bug fixes and is recommended for all POD Go and POD Go Wireless users.

 

How do I update to 1.21?

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.21

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.21:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go/POD Go Wireless

Shut down any programs that use audio or connect to your POD Go device, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.

Disable the sleep timer on your computer. The update will fail if your computer goes to sleep during the process.

If you are using a laptop, plug it in, or ensure it has enough battery life to complete the update without shutting down.

 

  1. Connect POD Go or POD Go Wireless to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch POD Go Edit 1.21.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then click "Check for Updates".
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Please keep POD GO Edit in focus throughout the entire update. Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.
  8. Click "Back to POD Go Edit".

 

New Amps in 1.21

Amps.jpg

 

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

 

New Cabs in 1.21

Cabs.jpg

 

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

 

New Effects in 1.21

POD121_Effects.jpg

 

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive, based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw, based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz, inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz, based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz, based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate, based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim, based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Includes an extra Shimmer parameter that imparts some motion to the harmonics, reminiscent of how a string's vibration tends to affect the other strings. Just like the original, works best with single-coil pickups. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Delay > Glitch Delay, Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real-time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backward
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

Changes and Improvements in 1.21

  • Support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Audio communication is now more stable when using the class-compliant driver in macOS
  • EQ > Low/High Shelf's High Freq parameter now goes down to 400Hz

 

Bug Fixes in 1.21

  • With an external expression pedal connected, EXP 1 and EXP 2 could become swapped under certain conditions—FIXED
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > Snapshot Mode is set to "Auto Return" and Up/Down Switches is set to "Presets," pressing Up or Down would not correctly exit Snapshot mode
  • In rare cases, attempting to swap footswitches (by holding two stomps) while the model list or preset list was open could result in a freeze–FIXED
  • In rare cases, audio could be lost after updating via Line 6 Updater. Updating via POD Go Edit would not exhibit this behavior—FIXED
  • In some cases, after exiting 6 Switch Looper mode, stomp switch LEDs could fail to light properly until pressed—FIXED
  • In rare cases, snapshot selection could not properly recall a block's bypass/enable state—FIXED
  • Dynamics > LA Studio Comp's level could drop if placed after an input boost, which is then toggled on and off—FIXED
  • In some cases, None and Looper categories in the model list could fail to update the display—FIXED
  • In some cases, pressing the expression pedal toe switch could not properly bypass/enable assigned blocks—FIXED
  • With very low Delay settings, Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch and Dual Pitch could exhibit metallic artifacts—FIXED
  • A minor pop could be heard when selecting different IRs while signal was present—FIXED
  • In rare cases, restoring from a backup could sometimes cause the unit to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, selecting a preset would not properly recall the active expression pedal (EXP 1 or EXP 2)—FIXED
  • Importing IRs immediately after launching POD Go Edit could sometimes result in an error message—FIXED
  • Transmitting MIDI CC60 or CC61 to control POD Go's looper could sometimes cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • When Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS Auto Assign was set to "Off," selecting a different effect category could sometimes cause the footswitch to display the previous category's color—FIXED
  • Various graphical glitches—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 1.21

  • Global Settings > In/Outs > Guitar In Pad is not recalled after turning POD Go off and back on again. Unfortunately, this will need to be manually  toggled after each power cycle before it begins working again
  • Importing a .WAV file into the current empty slot of an Impulse Response block can cause POD Go to stop passing audio. WORKAROUND: Select a different IR and then reselect the new one; audio should resume
  • Under certain circumstances, tapping a tempo for an extended period of time in POD GO Edit may result in POD Go freezing.

 

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 19 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

121_Splash.jpg

 

POD Go 1.21 includes new amps, new cabs, new effects, and bug fixes and is recommended for all POD Go and POD Go Wireless users.

 

How do I update to 1.21?

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.21

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.21:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go/POD Go Wireless

Shut down any programs that use audio or connect to your POD Go device, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.

Disable the sleep timer on your computer. The update will fail if your computer goes to sleep during the process.

If you are using a laptop, plug it in, or ensure it has enough battery life to complete the update without shutting down.

 

  1. Connect POD Go or POD Go Wireless to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch POD Go Edit 1.21.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then click "Check for Updates".
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Please keep POD GO Edit in focus throughout the entire update. Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.
  8. Click "Back to POD Go Edit".

 

New Amps in 1.21

Amps.jpg

 

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

 

New Cabs in 1.21

Cabs.jpg

 

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

 

New Effects in 1.21

POD121_Effects.jpg

 

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive, based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw, based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz, inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz, based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz, based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate, based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim, based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Includes an extra Shimmer parameter that imparts some motion to the harmonics, reminiscent of how a string's vibration tends to affect the other strings. Just like the original, works best with single-coil pickups. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Delay > Glitch Delay, Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real-time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backward
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

 

Changes and Improvements in 1.21

  • Support for macOS 11 Big Sur
  • Audio communication is now more stable when using the class-compliant driver in macOS
  • EQ > Low/High Shelf's High Freq parameter now goes down to 400Hz

 

Bug Fixes in 1.21

  • With an external expression pedal connected, EXP 1 and EXP 2 could become swapped under certain conditions—FIXED
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > Snapshot Mode is set to "Auto Return" and Up/Down Switches is set to "Presets," pressing Up or Down would not correctly exit Snapshot mode
  • In rare cases, attempting to swap footswitches (by holding two stomps) while the model list or preset list was open could result in a freeze–FIXED
  • In rare cases, audio could be lost after updating via Line 6 Updater. Updating via POD Go Edit would not exhibit this behavior—FIXED
  • In some cases, after exiting 6 Switch Looper mode, stomp switch LEDs could fail to light properly until pressed—FIXED
  • In rare cases, snapshot selection could not properly recall a block's bypass/enable state—FIXED
  • Dynamics > LA Studio Comp's level could drop if placed after an input boost, which is then toggled on and off—FIXED
  • In some cases, None and Looper categories in the model list could fail to update the display—FIXED
  • In some cases, pressing the expression pedal toe switch could not properly bypass/enable assigned blocks—FIXED
  • With very low Delay settings, Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch and Dual Pitch could exhibit metallic artifacts—FIXED
  • A minor pop could be heard when selecting different IRs while signal was present—FIXED
  • In rare cases, restoring from a backup could sometimes cause the unit to freeze—FIXED
  • In some cases, selecting a preset would not properly recall the active expression pedal (EXP 1 or EXP 2)—FIXED
  • Importing IRs immediately after launching POD Go Edit could sometimes result in an error message—FIXED
  • Transmitting MIDI CC60 or CC61 to control POD Go's looper could sometimes cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • When Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS Auto Assign was set to "Off," selecting a different effect category could sometimes cause the footswitch to display the previous category's color—FIXED
  • Various graphical glitches—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

 

Known Issues in 1.21

  • Global Settings > In/Outs > Guitar In Pad is not recalled after turning POD Go off and back on again. Unfortunately, this will need to be manually  toggled after each power cycle before it begins working again
  • Importing a .WAV file into the current empty slot of an Impulse Response block can cause POD Go to stop passing audio. WORKAROUND: Select a different IR and then reselect the new one; audio should resume
  • Under certain circumstances, tapping a tempo for an extended period of time in POD GO Edit may result in POD Go freezing.

 

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 32 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Helix Driver2

This driver update adds support for HX Stomp XL.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 HX Stomp Driver2

This driver update adds support for HX Stomp XL

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 13 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 POD Go Driver2

This driver update adds support for POD Go Wireless.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 756 KB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

This driver update adds support for POD Go Wireless.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 13 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Helix Driver2

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 13 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 WinUsb

This driver update adds support for HX Stomp XL and POD Go Wireless.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Line 6 Updater      

Line 6 Updater

This version of Line 6 Updater adds compatibility for HX Stomp XL, POD Go Wireless, and Relay G10TII.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 49 MB )
Get Download

Line 6 Updater      

Line 6 Updater

This version of Line 6 Updater adds compatibility for HX Stomp XL, POD Go Wireless, and Relay G10TII.

When installing this software on macOS Catalina or macOS Big Sur, users may encounter an alert message. To progress beyond the alert message, hold the Control key when launching Line6Updater.pkg, then click "Open" when the dialog message appears. Alternatively, adjusting the appropriate settings in System Preferences as shown in the following article will resolve the issue:

https://line6.com/support/page/kb/recording/computer-audio-set-up-and-troubleshooting/trouble-opening-installersoftware-on-mac-osx-catalina-1015-r936/

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 69 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

HX Edit 3.01

 
HX Edit 3.01 includes bug fixes and an improved firmware updating procedure, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what version of HX Edit you're currently running; you can go straight to 3.01.
 
New Features
  • AFTER installing HX Edit 3.01, updating firmware for Helix and HX products is now more consistent and seamless. For example, the update process now forces you to update HX Edit before your Helix/HX hardware. (Imagine that.) Even if the bugs below don’t apply to you, we strongly recommend updating HX Edit to 3.01 so you’ll be ready to go for our next release.
 
Bug Fixes
  • After logging into your Line 6 account, the “Check for Updates” link could disappear—FIXED
  • After exporting and then importing presets into HX Stomp, any snapshot-controlled Command Center values could sometimes not be recalled properly—FIXED
  • In HX Stomp, creating a Command Center > HX Preset command would result in preset numbering from Helix, Helix Rack, or Helix LT (that is, D presets could appear, even though HX Stomp’s presets are limited to A, B, and C)—FIXED
  • In rare cases, moving a block from the far left of the signal path to the far right could result in a "Failed to Move Item" error (-4)—FIXED

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 27 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

HX Edit 3.01

 
HX Edit 3.01 includes bug fixes and an improved firmware updating procedure, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what version of HX Edit you're currently running; you can go straight to 3.01.
 
New Features
  • AFTER installing HX Edit 3.01, updating firmware for Helix and HX products is now more consistent and seamless. For example, the update process now forces you to update HX Edit before your Helix/HX hardware. (Imagine that.) Even if the bugs below don’t apply to you, we strongly recommend updating HX Edit to 3.01 so you’ll be ready to go for our next release.
 
Bug Fixes
  • After logging into your Line 6 account, the “Check for Updates” link could disappear—FIXED
  • After exporting and then importing presets into HX Stomp, any snapshot-controlled Command Center values could sometimes not be recalled properly—FIXED
  • In HX Stomp, creating a Command Center > HX Preset command would result in preset numbering from Helix, Helix Rack, or Helix LT (that is, D presets could appear, even though HX Stomp’s presets are limited to A, B, and C)—FIXED
  • In rare cases, moving a block from the far left of the signal path to the far right could result in a "Failed to Move Item" error (-4)—FIXED

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 88 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

HX Effects Firmware 3.02.0

Bug Fixes:

In certain circumstances, engaging Looper > 1 Switch Looper functions could result in a freeze.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 35 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 44 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

The Helix 3.01 update addresses potential severely corrupted audio output. Due to this, we recommend updating your Helix family device as soon as possible. This issue may also be experienced on Helix Native, an update for Native will be available in the very near future.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

 

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes in 3.01

  • In extremely rare cases with specific blocks in a specific order, audio could become severely corrupted–FIXED
  • In certain cases, the Delay > Glitch Delay can exhibit minor pops and clicks when placed on Path 2, regardless of where its Smoothing parameter is set (that is, not the good type of glitchiness)—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Bug Fixes in 3.0

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues in 3.01

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 3 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

Helix 3.0 includes new amps, cabs, effects, features, bug fixes, and other changes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • After exiting a menu, HX Stomp’s TAP LED can occasionally appear to blink erratically
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 89 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

Helix 3.0 includes new amps, cabs, effects, features, bug fixes, and other changes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.

New Amps

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb
  • Das Benzin Mega, based on* the Mega channel of the Diezel VH4
  • Das Benzin Lead, based on* the Lead channel of the Diezel VH4

New Cabs

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Stomp

  • 1x10 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb cab
  • 1x12 US Princess, based on* the Fender® Princeton Reverb with a 12" Alnico Blue driver

New Effects

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

  • Distortion > Horizon Drive (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB
  • Distortion > Swedish Chainsaw (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® HM-2 Heavy Metal Distortion (Made in Japan black label)
  • Distortion > Pocket Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), inspired by* the Jordan Boss Tone fuzz
  • Distortion > Bighorn Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the 1973 Electro-Harmonix® Ram's Head Big Muff Pi
  • Distortion > Ballistic Fuzz (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Euthymia ICBM fuzz
  • Dynamics > Horizon Gate (Mono, Stereo), based on* the Horizon Devices Precision Drive's gate circuit. Includes an extra Gate Range parameter that, when set to "Extended," drops the gate's threshold down to -90dB. Works best before an amp
  • EQ > Acoustic Sim (Mono, Stereo), based on* the BOSS® AC-2 Acoustic Simulator. Can be used alone or in conjunction with an acoustic IR
  • Modulation > Poly Detune (Mono), Line 6 Original
  • Delay > Poly Sustain (Mono), Line 6 Original
    1. Assign Poly Sustain to a stomp footswitch. By default, Poly Sustain appears bypassed.
    2. First play the note or chord you wish to sustain, and then press the footswitch (on) to sustain it indefinitely. Keep playing while the note or chord loops. TIP: Some players may find it easier to change the footswitch mode to Momentary; that way, the note or chord sustains only while you hold the switch on, much like the sustain pedal on a piano.
    3. Press the switch again (off) and the sustained note or chord fades out.
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the sustained note or chord. TIP: This parameter is especially cool for creating massive drones to play over
    • Attack—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades in
    • Decay—Sets the speed at which the sustained note or chord fades out after bypassing the effect
    • Mod Freq—Sets the speed of the built in modulation
    • Mod Depth—Sets the depth of the built in modulation
    • FX Level—Sets the level of the sustained signal
    • RandDpth—Higher values increase the randomization of the section of audio being sustained, resulting in a more natural, but less predictable drone
    • RandSpeed—Controls how fast the randomization wanders. Setting both RndDpth and RndSpd to high values will result in a glitch fest (not that there's anything wrong with that)
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Delay > Glitch Delay (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original performance delay that lets you freely manipulate the repeats' behavior in real time
    • Time—Sets the delay time; press the knob to toggle between ms/sec and note values
    • Delay Div—Divides the delay time into smaller increments
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the delay. When set to 0%, no delay is heard; when set to 100%, no dry signal is heard
    • Feedback—Controls the overall number of repeats heard for the entire sequence
    • SliceFdbk—Controls the number of repeats heard for individual slices. At higher values, you could call this "Super Chaotic Feedback"
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of repeats shuffling/reordering
    • Octaves—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of repeats playing backwards
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0%, the same sequence loops forever. TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Trails—When on, delay repeats continue to ring out after the block is bypassed
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Pitch (Mono), Line 6 Original
    • NOTE: Polyphonic pitch engines are designed for shifting complex chords with minimal artifacts, at the expense of latency (and our algorithms have lower latency than leading standalone poly pitch pedals). If you're looking to pitch individual notes (such as in a solo), monophonic pitchshifting is often preferred. See the Tracking parameter below for more information
    • IMPORTANT! 3.0's new poly models are extremely DSP-intensive. Some effects can eat up roughly a quarter of all available DSP on a Helix Floor, Rack, or LT or half (!!!) of all available DSP on HX Stomp or HX Effects. You also can't run more than one on the same path/DSP. Don't say we didn't warn you...
    • Interval—Sets the pitch of the effect in semitones
    • Cents—Sets the pitch of the effect in cents
    • ShiftTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to ramp up or down to the set pitch when the block is enabled. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values. TIP: Want to hit the switch and have Poly Pitch dive bomb and land on the selected interval exactly one bar later? Press the knob to select note values and set ShiftTime to "1/1"
    • ShiftCurve—Determines the trajectory curve of the pitch shift over time. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite). The default is "Linear"
    • ReturnTime—Determines how long it takes for the signal to return to normal pitch when the block is bypassed. Press the knob to toggle between ms/Sec and note/beat values
    • ReturnCurv—Determines the trajectory curve when returning to the original pitch. StartSlow values are concave (slower changes to start, speeding up toward the end); StartFast values are convex (the opposite)
    • Tracking—Determines how the poly pitch engine behaves. "X Fast" results in lower latency, ideal for faster lead lines. "X Stable" (the default) results in fewer artifacts when pitch shifting complex, sustained chords. "Fast" and "Stable" are somewhere in between. TIP: If you find yourself changing playing styles—say from fast lead lines to clean, open chords—you can assign this parameter to a footswitch (or snapshots) to optimize the balance between transparency and low latency
    • Auto EQ—Determines how much compensation EQ is applied to the shifted signal. If the effected signal sounds too harsh when pitched up (or dull when pitched down), adjust this setting to taste. When set to 0.0, no compensation is applied
    • Mix—Controls the wet/dry mix of the pitchshift
    • Level—Controls the overall output level of the block
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Wham (Mono), Line 6 Original. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > Poly Capo (Mono), Line 6 Original. Simpler version of Poly Pitch when you just want to change keys. Works equally well on guitar and bass, although you might want to tweak the Auto EQ parameter for your particular instrument. See Poly Pitch notes above for additional information
  • Pitch/Synth > 12 String (Mono), Line 6 Original 12-string guitar emulation
  • Volume/Pan > Stereo Imager (Stereo), Line 6 Original
  • Looper > Shuffling Looper (Mono, Stereo), Line 6 Original. Part looper, part sampler, part inspiration generator, part performance instrument, the Shuffling Looper intelligently chops up your playing and gives you realtime control over reordering, octave shifting, reversing, and repeating. It's all immense fun (even on vocals, drums, and percussion), but you'll want to familiarize yourself with its controls. IMPORTANT: The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  1. Add Looper > Shuffling Looper to a preset and assign it to a footswitch.
  2. Turn Knob 1 (Slices) to set the number of slices your loop will be chopped into. 8 slices is the default.
  3. Press the switch to begin recording. The LED lights red, indicating the loop is recording.
  4. At the end of your loop, press the switch. The LED lights green and the sliced loop sequence immediately plays.
  5. During playback, adjust the following knobs (or assign them to controllers, like expression pedals or snapshots):
    • Slices—Changes the number of slices your loop will be chopped into
    • SeqLength—Determines the number of slices in the sequence. This can be changed even after recording a loop
    • Shuffle—Determines the likelihood of slices shuffling/reordering. At 0%, the slices never shuffle; at 100%, they're constantly reshuffling
    • Octave—Determines the likelihood of slices playing back an octave higher or lower
    • Reverse—Determines the likelihood of slices playing backwards
    • Repeat—Determines the likelihood of slices repeating
    • Smoothing—Higher values apply smoothing between slices and can give a synth-pad type quality, lower values maintain transients. Or set it just high enough to avoid pops and clicks
    • Seq Drift—Determines the likelihood of the entire slice sequence changing every time it loops around. When set to 0.0, the same sequence repeats forever; when set to 10.0, the sequence changes completely every time it loops TIP: Assign this parameter to a footswitch set to toggle between a higher number and 0%. If you hear a random sequence you want to maintain, press the switch to set Seq Drift to 0%, and it'll repeat that way indefinitely
    • Playback—Sets the looper's playback level
    • Low Cut—Applies a low cut (or high pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal below a certain frequency
    • High Cut—Applies a high cut (or low pass) filter to the loop, letting you remove looper signal above a certain frequency
  6. Want to change it up? While the loop is playing, press the switch to randomize its slice sequence.
  7. Quickly double-press the switch. Playback/recording stops and the LED lights white, indicating a loop is in memory. Press again to restart.
  8. While the loop is playing or stopped, press and hold the switch. The recording is deleted and the LED lights dim white.

*NOTE: All product names used in this document are trademarks of their respective owners and neither Yamaha Guitar Group nor Line 6 are associated or affiliated with them. These trademarks appear solely to identify products whose tones and sounds were studied by Line 6 during sound model development.

New Features

True Preset Spillover

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT

Despite what some might have you believe, the only digital multieffects units with true preset spillover were the DigiTech GSP1101, 2112, and 2120, and they accomplished this by dedicating one of their two DSPs to spillover and only spillover. (Basically, to hear two dynamically allocated presets with absolutely zero gap—not a global reverb smeared to cover the gap—you need enough DSP to run both of them simultaneously.) So... if you're willing to sacrifice half your DSP—that is, COMPLETELY DISABLE PATH 2—you too can have true preset spillover. IMPORTANT! Unfortunately, Looper recording or playback will not currently spill over from one preset to another. Also, note that there may be a slight hiccup when switching between two presets with different impedance values for the Guitar Input.

  1. In the Global Settings > Preferences menu, set Preset Spillover to "On." (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME.) A dialog appears, reading "Remove Path 2 to enable preset spillover?"
  2. Press Knob 6 (OK).
  3. Press HOME. Path 2 has disappeared! You may now switch presets to your heart's delight with true spillover but note that if Preset A is still spilling over into Preset B (say one of its delay blocks' feedback is making it self-oscillate), switching to Preset C will abruptly cut off Preset A.
  4. To return to normal operation with two paths, turn Preset Spillover back to "Off". (SHORTCUT: Hold ACTION and press HOME again.) A dialog appears, reading "The preset must be reloaded. All unsaved changes will be lost!" So if you've made changes to the preset, be sure to save it before turning Spillover off.
  5. Press Knob 6 (OK).

But but but... I don't wanna lose Path 2 just for spillover!

Then keep using snapshots.

Favorites

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

If you've dialed in an amp or effects block exactly the way you like it, you can now save its settings as a favorite so it can be added very quickly, complete with bypass state and footswitch assignment. Favorites appear in a new "Favorites" category and can be renamed, reordered, and cleared. TIP: If you don't want a favorite to be recalled with its footswitch assignment, add the block before you assign a switch.

  1. Choose one of your favorite amps or effects and tweak it exactly how you like it, with or without footswitch assignment.
  2. Press ACTION and then press Add to Favorites. The Favorites list appears.
  3. If you wish to replace an existing favorite (you get 128 total), select it and press Replace Favorite. If you wish to add a new favorite, select the location where you want to place it and press Add New Favorite.
  4. OPTIONAL: While the Favorites list is open, press ACTION.
    • To reorder the selected favorite up or down the list, turn Reorder Favorite (on HX Effects, press Reorder Up or Reorder Down)
    • To rename the selected favorite, press Rename Favorite
    • To clear the selected favorite, press Clear Favorite
    • To clear all favorites, press Clear All Favorites. A dialog appears. Press OK to confirm.

All right, so what?

Here's what:

  1. At any time, select an empty block and turn the joystick (Big Knob on HX Effects or Lower Knob on HX Stomp). All your perfectly-tweaked favorite amps and effects instantly appear, without having to open the model list at all. If you typically keep model categories on the same stomp footswitches, you could conceivably create a brand new preset with all of your favorite stuff—including all footswitch assignments—in less than 10 seconds. Creating tones has never been faster or easier. TIP: If you keep one or more external pedals connected to Helix's FX Loops, add the FX Loop blocks as favorites and then rename them after the real thing.

User Model Defaults

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp

3.0 lets you save any amp, cab, or effect block's settings as default so every time you call that model up, it sounds exactly the way you want it. Or, if you want to revert it to factory default, you can do that too. NOTE: Unlike Favorites, user model defaults do not store any footswitch assignments.

  1. Choose any model and tweak it exactly how you like it.
  2. Press ACTION and then User Default. From Helix Native or HX Edit, right-click (Mac: control-click) the block icon and select "User Default"

Global Settings > Preferences > Auto Impedance

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp

A new Global Settings > Preference parameter determines how the Guitar In's impedance circuit behaves when Input > In-Z is set to "Auto." When set to "First Block" (the default), the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first block on Path 1A, regardless of whether it's enabled or bypassed. When set to "First Enabled", the impedance circuit reflects the impedance of the first enabled block on Path 1A. Called "Auto Impedance" because "Sorry-this-took-so-long-we-love-you-Tito83" wouldn't fit.

Min/Max Value Indicators

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, HX Stomp [Feature already in HX Effects]

Parameters assigned to controllers or snapshots now display small Min Value (below) and Max Value (above) indicators. You can now see the range of continuous controllers from the Home screen.

8 Blocks in HX Stomp

HX Stomp

HX Stomp's simultaneous block count has been increased from six to eight.

IMPORTANT! Although HX Stomp now has two additional block locations, this doesn't mean it magically has more DSP horsepower to accommodate those blocks. Don't be surprised if you're not able to fill all eight blocks with exactly what you want, especially considering the new polyphonic pitch models take up a lot more DSP. We've taken note of those who've bemoaned HX Stomp's 6 block limit, and if the same person now complains about running out of DSP with 8 blocks, we're sending hooligans to their home to administer an atomic wedgie.

NOTE: It shouldn't come as any surprise, but any presets you make in 3.0 will not be compatible with 2.92 or earlier firmware.

Command Center in HX Stomp

HX Stomp [Feature already in Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, and HX Effects]

Why would people expect a stompbox with only three footswitches to also act as a master MIDI controller? Yeah, we don't know either, but enough of you asked for it and it wasn't exceedingly difficult to add.

  1. Press together to open the Menu and then press Knob 3 (Command Center).
  2. Turn the Upper Knob to select the command source (Instant 1-6, Footswitch 1-5, or EXP 1-2).
  3. Turn Knob 1 (Command) to select the type of command you wish to transmit. For information on the types of commands HX Stomp transmits, see the HX Stomp 3.0 Owner's Manual.

Wait, does this mean I can use HX Stomp as both an audio interface AND a remote control for YouTube lesson videos by sending QWERTY hotkeys?

Yes.

Tuner in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix and HX hardware]

Helix Native now has the same needle and strobe tuner from Helix.

  1. Click the tuner icon.
  2. Choose the tuner type by selecting Coarse, Fine, or Strobe.

Gain Reduction Meters in Helix Native

Helix Native [Feature already in Helix hardware]

The following block types display a gain reduction meter in the inspector when selected:

  • Dynamics > Compressor
  • Dynamics > Gate

Artist Presets

IMPORTANT! Because we never want to overwrite your own presets, upgrading to 3.0 does NOT automatically make these presets visible; you will need to manually restore them. Restoring factory setlists and presets will completely overwrite your own, so make sure they're backed up first!

TIP: With Helix Floor/Rack/LT/Native, if you want to keep both your presets and the latest factory presets, back up your custom presets as setlists and after the procedure below, drag your setlists onto unused setlist locations.

  1. Make sure you've backed up your presets and turn off Helix/HX.
  2. Perform the following procedure:
    • Helix Floor/LT: While holding footswitches 7 and 8 (two leftmost switches on the bottom row), turn on Helix Floor/LT. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Rack/Control: While holding knobs 3 and 4 (two middle knobs below the screen), turn on Helix Rack. Wait for "Will restore..." to appear and let go
    • Helix Native: Click the gear icon in the lower left corner, click the Presets/IRs tab, and click "Restore Factory Setlists"

Helix 3.0 includes factory presets created by the following artists:

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native [FACTORY 1 setlist]

  • 13B-14C—Fish (Christina Aguilera)
  • 14D—Jeff Waters (Annihilator)
  • 15A, 15B—Richie Castellano (Blue Öyster Cult)
  • 15C—Robbie Calvo
  • 15D—Ryan "Fluff" Bruce (Dragged Under)
  • 16A-16D—Felix Martin
  • 17A—Mario Quintaro (Spotlights)
  • 17B, 17C—Bumblefoot (Sons of Apollo)
  • 17D, 18A—Billy Sheehan (Sons of Apollo, Winery Dogs)
  • 18B—Andy Abad (Jennifer Lopez)
  • 18C-19B—Misha Mansoor (Periphery)
  • 19C—Duke Erikson (Garbage)
  • 19D—Steve Marker (Garbage)
  • 20A—Eric Avery (Garbage)
  • 20B—Bill Kelliher (Mastodon)
  • 20C—John Browne (Monuments)
  • 20D—Olly Steele (Monuments)
  • 21A—Jon Button (The Who)
  • 21B—Trev Lukather (Levara)
  • 21C—Steve Howe (Yes)
  • 21D—Dustin Kensrue (Thrice)
  • 22A—Pete Thorn
  • 22B—Rhett Shull
  • 22C—Jade Puget (A.F.I.)
  • 22D, 23A—Jeff Schroeder (The Smashing Pumpkins)
  • 23B—Graham Coxon (Blur)
  • 23C, 23D—Chris Buck
  • 24A—Lewis Allen (Sam Smith)
  • 24B-25A—Rabea Massaad
  • 25B—Soren Andersen
  • 25C—Devin Townsend
  • 25D—Nathan Navarro
  • Vernon Reid
  • 27B—Philip Bynoe
  • 27C, 27D—Markus Reuter

HX Effects

  • 12A-12D—Julien Baker
  • 13A—Sarah "Noveller" Lipstate
  • 13B, 13C—Steve Stevens

3.0 Owner's Manuals

Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT, Helix Native, HX Effects, HX Stomp, HX Edit

As it's immensely expensive and complicated to translate Owner's Manuals into the many languages we're required by law to provide, Helix and HX Owner's Manuals have not been updated since 2.X. They've now been updated for 3.0:

  • Helix Floor: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Rack/Control: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix LT: Link available soon—watch this space
  • Helix Native: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Effects: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Stomp: Link available soon—watch this space
  • HX Edit: Link available soon—watch this space

Other Changes and Improvements

  • On HX Stomp, Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select now has an "Off" value. When set this way, neither touching nor pressing will change which block is in focus [value is already in Helix Floor, Rack, and LT]
  • Favorites can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • User Model Defaults can now be restored from a backup, independently of setlists, presets, IRs, and Global Settings
  • Gain reduction meters now also appear for the Input block's noise gate
  • Gain reduction meters and signal present indicators are now more responsive
  • Parameter knob ballistics have been improved
  • New splash screens for Helix Floor/Rack/LT and HX Stomp
  • Parameter slider handles are thinner to accommodate new min/max value indicators
  • Press-turning a knob to assign Snapshot control now requires a bit more turning to minimize accidental assignments
  • Pitch/Synth > 4 OSC Generator OscFreq parameters now display single Hz resolution between 100 and 1000 Hz

Bug Fixes

  • When synced to external MIDI clock or retriggering via TAP, certain models with tremolo circuits' LFO set to square wave would invert the waveform–FIXED
  • If Helix had been left powered on for 24 hours with the same preset active (What? Why?), its reverb blocks could become disabled until selecting another preset—FIXED
  • Many other minor fixes and improvements

Known Issues

  • Distortion > Vermin Dist's resonant filter was mapped incorrectly, and is especially apparent at higher gain settings. This will be fixed in 3.10
  • In the Poly Pitch models, very fast playing may exhibit some minor onset smearing. Additional improvements to the poly pitch engine are forthcoming
  • The Shuffling Looper does not currently respond to Command Center > HX Commands or per-function MIDI commands
  • Variax Model min and max sliders do not automatically update when a Variax is connected
  • When Tuner View is active while Spillover is engaged, changing presets can sometimes cause audio output to stop
  • After importing a .WAV file into the current 'Empty' slot of an Impulse Response block, all audio output can stop
  • After exiting a menu, HX Stomp’s TAP LED can occasionally appear to blink erratically
  • Clearing a Split block on Path 2 does not automatically remove its bypass assignment

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 26 MB )
Get Download

Spider V Remote      

Spider V Remote

This release contains Apple Notarization

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 25 MB )
Get Download

Powercab Edit      

Powercab Edit

This release contains Apple Notarization

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 10 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

This firmware addresses the following issues:

• Certain RELAY G10T transmitters when using the 1.05 firmware in elevated temperatures would not charge correctly. This firmware addresses this issue to ensure correct charging behavior.

• Additionally, we are improving the LED behavior to more accurately display the charging status.

This firmware also incorporates the important safety updates from the v1.05 firmware, which addresses the following:

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

Regarding Relay G10, Relay G10S, and Relay G10T Wireless Products Purchased Prior to February 2020

Four instances of extreme overheating occurring in the transmitter during charging have been reported since the introduction of the product in 2016. Due to this we recommend owners of these products update them to the latest firmware as soon as possible, which is intended to eliminate this risk.

Once you install the firmware update, we will collect personally identifiable information (PII) data for the purpose of determining which products have been updated. You can find further information at: https://yamahaguitargroup.com/privacypolicy/

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Windows 8, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 29 KB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

POD Go 1.12

POD Go 1.12 includes general bug fixes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all POD Go owners.

 

Updating POD Go to 1.12

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.11

If you already have POD Go Edit 1.11 installed, please skip to STEP 2

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.11:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go

  1. Connect POD Go to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch POD Go Edit.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then click "Check for Updates".
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.
  8. Click "Back to POD Go Edit".

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.12

  • On rare occasions, POD Go could occasionally get stuck on the splash screen—FIXED
  • On rare occasions, quickly changing modes could cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • On rare occasions, entering the menu immediately after changing snapshots could cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • If an external expression pedal or footswitch is connected to EXP 2/FS7/8, Wah/Vol behavior could become unpredictable—FIXED
  • Additional optimizations
  • Lots of other minor bug fixes

 

Known Issues in 1.12

  • In rare cases when connected via USB, POD Go may appear unresponsive after powering down a connected PC. If this happens, unplug the USB cable from POD Go, at which point it should behave normally

  • On rare occasions, audio can be lost if POD Go is powered on while a connected Mac/PC is passing audio via USB

  • On rare occasions, POD Go can freeze while restoring from a backup. In this case, attempt the restore again
  • Sending a MIDI CC68 message from your computer can sometimes cause a graphical glitch
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > FS Auto Assign is set to "Off," changing a block's model category can sometimes reflect the previous category color on the footswitch

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 2 MB )
Get Download

POD HD500X Edit      

POD HD500X Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS X, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur, macOS Big Sur
( 35 MB )
Get Download

POD HD500 Edit      

POD HD500 Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 32 MB )
Get Download

POD HD Pro Edit      

POD HD Pro Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 32 MB )
Get Download

POD HD Pro X Edit      

POD HD Pro X Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 35 MB )
Get Download

POD HD300 Edit      

POD HD300 Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 26 MB )
Get Download

POD HD400 Edit      

POD HD400 Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 26 MB )
Get Download

POD HD Edit      

POD HD Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 31 MB )
Get Download

Spider IV Edit      

Spider IV Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Spider Valve MkII Edit      

Spider Valve Edit

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Workbench HD      

Workbench HD

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 20 MB )
Get Download

Line 6 FBV Control      

FBV Control

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 6 MB )
Get Download

POD Farm 2      

POD Farm Installer Mac

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 193 MB )
Get Download

Line 6 License Manager      

Line 6 License Manager

Adds support for macOS Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Mac OS Leopard, Mac OS Snow Leopard, Mac OS Lion, Mac OS Mountain Lion, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 1 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

This update improves the stability of Helix Native and is recommended for all users.

  • Fixes a crash that could occur when dialog boxes are presented
  • Fixes a crash that would occur when loading a preset with a missing IR

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 36 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

This update improves the stability of Helix Native and is recommended for all users.

  • Fixes a crash that would occur when loading a preset with a missing IR

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 45 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Helix Driver2

This driver update adds support for macOS 10.15 Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 5 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Helix Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 13 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 HX Stomp Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 13 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 13 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 Driver2

Fixes a crash that would occur with Logitech's G HUB.

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 7 MB )
Get Download

Echo Farm      

Echo Farm

Adds support for macOS 10.15 Catalina and fixes the following bugs:

  • Tempo Sync state is not recalled correctly
  • Tap Tempo does not function in VST2/VST3 formats
  • Added Factory presets for the VST2/VST3 formats (host dependent)

    Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
    ( 67 MB )
    Get Download

Amp Farm      

Amp Farm

Adds support for macOS 10.15 Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina, macOS Big Sur
( 64 MB )
Get Download

Drivers      

Line 6 POD Go Driver2

This driver update adds support for macOS 10.15 Catalina.

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 753 KB )
Get Download

Echo Farm      

Echo Farm

Fixes the following bugs:

  • Tempo Sync state is not recalled correctly
  • Tap Tempo does not function in VST2/VST3 formats
  • Added Factory presets for the VST2/VST3 formats (host dependent)

    Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
    ( 65 MB )
    Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

POD Go 1.11 / POD Go Edit 1.11

POD Go 1.11 includes general bug fixes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all POD Go owners.

 

Updating POD Go to 1.11

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.11

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.11:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go

  1. Connect POD Go to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch the version of POD Go Edit you installed in Step 1 above.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then Preferences to check for updates.
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.11

  • POD Go can occasionally freeze on boot up, forcing a restart—FIXED
  • Changing models in the Wah or Volume/Pan categories would automatically engage the block, even when bypassed—FIXED
  • Engaging stomp switches via MIDI CC does not properly focus the selected block—FIXED
  • While in Play view, holding ACTION and pressing a parameter knob does not properly remove any snapshot assignment—FIXED
  • Pressing the Upper Knob after selecting a snapshot from Preset List view does not always load the selected snapshots—FIXED
  • Engaging a Looper block does not automatically display its parameters—FIXED
  • Sending POD Go MIDI Clock while the Tempo Panel is open can sometimes cause the signal flow to disappear—FIXED
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > EXP 2 Position is set to "Global", when booting POD Go, EXP2 loads at heel-down position (no volume)—FIXED
  • Pressing Stomp mode switches immediately after loading a preset can cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • Turning the main volume knob while loading an IR can sometimes cause the DSP to lock up—FIXED
  • In rare cases, swapping stomp switches can result in unexpected graphic anomalies—FIXED
  • In rare cases, attempting to swap the Looper switch with another stomp switch can cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • If the menu is open from Tuner view, pressing HOME can cause the upper portion of the display to disappear—FIXED
  • Streaming audio through POD Go while restoring from a backup can cause audio to disappear until restarting—FIXED
  • While in the Bypass/Control menu, loading a different preset could display graphical anomalies—FIXED
  • While in Edit view, quickly turning the Upper Knob could cause the EQ block to blink—FIXED
  • While updating firmware, POD Go's footswitch rings could intermittently flash—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, renaming a preset does not automatically update POD Go if the Preset List view is visible—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, selecting a new preset while POD Go is queueing banks can cause the wrong bank to load
  • In POD Go Edit, the EQ icon was incorrect—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, setting Min Value or Max Value can sometimes cause POD Go's inspector to temporarily disappear—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, copying and pasting a block could sometimes not duplicate all snapshot data—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, double-clicking an unavailable effect could cause the Model Category list to disappear—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, some HDD configurations could cause the app to crash or display a blank screen—FIXED
  • Lots of other minor bug fixes

 

Known Issues in 1.11

  • On rare occasions, audio can be lost if POD Go is powered on while a connected Mac/PC is passing audio via USB
  • Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch and Dual Pitch can exhibit subtle artifacts when the Delay parameter is set between 0.4 and 0.7 ms
  • Sending a MIDI CC60 or CC61 message from your computer to control the Looper can sometimes cause POD Go to become unresponsive
  • Sending a MIDI CC68 message followed immediately by a PC message from your computer can sometimes cause POD Go's audio to mute
  • When a block is added from POD Go Edit, footswitches 5 and 6 may not immediately appear as if they're auto-assigned (even though they are)
  • While on the Save screen, holding ACTION and pressing SAVE does not save the preset to Factory > 32D New Preset
  • POD Go does not need a driver to work with your Mac; just plug in and go. However, it is currently limited to a sample rate of 48kHz. Line 6 is working carefully with Apple and will provide a driver that supports sample rates up to 96kHz

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 39 MB )
Get Download

POD Go Edit      

POD Go Edit

POD Go 1.11 / POD Go Edit 1.11

POD Go 1.11 includes general bug fixes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all POD Go owners.

 

Updating POD Go to 1.11

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.11

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.11:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go

  1. Connect POD Go to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch the version of POD Go Edit you installed in Step 1 above.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then Preferences to check for updates.
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.11

  • POD Go can occasionally freeze on boot up, forcing a restart—FIXED
  • Changing models in the Wah or Volume/Pan categories would automatically engage the block, even when bypassed—FIXED
  • Engaging stomp switches via MIDI CC does not properly focus the selected block—FIXED
  • While in Play view, holding ACTION and pressing a parameter knob does not properly remove any snapshot assignment—FIXED
  • Pressing the Upper Knob after selecting a snapshot from Preset List view does not always load the selected snapshots—FIXED
  • Engaging a Looper block does not automatically display its parameters—FIXED
  • Sending POD Go MIDI Clock while the Tempo Panel is open can sometimes cause the signal flow to disappear—FIXED
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > EXP 2 Position is set to "Global", when booting POD Go, EXP2 loads at heel-down position (no volume)—FIXED
  • Pressing Stomp mode switches immediately after loading a preset can cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • Turning the main volume knob while loading an IR can sometimes cause the DSP to lock up—FIXED
  • In rare cases, swapping stomp switches can result in unexpected graphic anomalies—FIXED
  • In rare cases, attempting to swap the Looper switch with another stomp switch can cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • If the menu is open from Tuner view, pressing HOME can cause the upper portion of the display to disappear—FIXED
  • Streaming audio through POD Go while restoring from a backup can cause audio to disappear until restarting—FIXED
  • While in the Bypass/Control menu, loading a different preset could display graphical anomalies—FIXED
  • While in Edit view, quickly turning the Upper Knob could cause the EQ block to blink—FIXED
  • While updating firmware, POD Go's footswitch rings could intermittently flash—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, renaming a preset does not automatically update POD Go if the Preset List view is visible—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, selecting a new preset while POD Go is queueing banks can cause the wrong bank to load
  • In POD Go Edit, the EQ icon was incorrect—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, setting Min Value or Max Value can sometimes cause POD Go's inspector to temporarily disappear—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, copying and pasting a block could sometimes not duplicate all snapshot data—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, double-clicking an unavailable effect could cause the Model Category list to disappear—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, some HDD configurations could cause the app to crash or display a blank screen—FIXED
  • Lots of other minor bug fixes

 

Known Issues in 1.11

  • On rare occasions, audio can be lost if POD Go is powered on while a connected Mac/PC is passing audio via USB
  • Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch and Dual Pitch can exhibit subtle artifacts when the Delay parameter is set between 0.4 and 0.7 ms
  • Sending a MIDI CC60 or CC61 message from your computer to control the Looper can sometimes cause POD Go to become unresponsive
  • Sending a MIDI CC68 message followed immediately by a PC message from your computer can sometimes cause POD Go's audio to mute
  • When a block is added from POD Go Edit, footswitches 5 and 6 may not immediately appear as if they're auto-assigned (even though they are)
  • While on the Save screen, holding ACTION and pressing SAVE does not save the preset to Factory > 32D New Preset
  • POD Go does not need a driver to work with your Mac; just plug in and go. However, it is currently limited to a sample rate of 48kHz. Line 6 is working carefully with Apple and will provide a driver that supports sample rates up to 96kHz

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 25 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

POD Go 1.11 / POD Go Edit 1.11

POD Go 1.11 includes general bug fixes and improvements and is strongly recommended for all POD Go owners.

 

Updating POD Go to 1.11

STEP 1—Installing POD Go Edit 1.11

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install POD Go Edit 1.11:

 

STEP 2—Updating POD Go

  1. Connect POD Go to your Mac or PC via USB and turn it on.
  2. Launch the version of POD Go Edit you installed in Step 1 above.
  3. Click the gear at the bottom of the window, then Preferences to check for updates.
  4. Log into your Line 6 account. A dialog panel appears, reading "An update is available for your POD Go. Would you like to update now?"
  5. Click "Update now." POD Go Edit asks if you want to create a backup of your existing user presets. Click "OK" and then "Create Backup." Once the backup is completed, click "OK."
  6. Carefully read the End User License Agreement (haaa hahaha!) and click "OK."
  7. Click "Update." Once the update is complete, POD Go restarts automatically.

 

 

Bug Fixes in 1.11

  • POD Go can occasionally freeze on boot up, forcing a restart—FIXED
  • Changing models in the Wah or Volume/Pan categories would automatically engage the block, even when bypassed—FIXED
  • Engaging stomp switches via MIDI CC does not properly focus the selected block—FIXED
  • While in Play view, holding ACTION and pressing a parameter knob does not properly remove any snapshot assignment—FIXED
  • Pressing the Upper Knob after selecting a snapshot from Preset List view does not always load the selected snapshots—FIXED
  • Engaging a Looper block does not automatically display its parameters—FIXED
  • Sending POD Go MIDI Clock while the Tempo Panel is open can sometimes cause the signal flow to disappear—FIXED
  • If Global Settings > Switches/Pedals > EXP 2 Position is set to "Global", when booting POD Go, EXP2 loads at heel-down position (no volume)—FIXED
  • Pressing Stomp mode switches immediately after loading a preset can cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • Turning the main volume knob while loading an IR can sometimes cause the DSP to lock up—FIXED
  • In rare cases, swapping stomp switches can result in unexpected graphic anomalies—FIXED
  • In rare cases, attempting to swap the Looper switch with another stomp switch can cause POD Go to freeze—FIXED
  • If the menu is open from Tuner view, pressing HOME can cause the upper portion of the display to disappear—FIXED
  • Streaming audio through POD Go while restoring from a backup can cause audio to disappear until restarting—FIXED
  • While in the Bypass/Control menu, loading a different preset could display graphical anomalies—FIXED
  • While in Edit view, quickly turning the Upper Knob could cause the EQ block to blink—FIXED
  • While updating firmware, POD Go's footswitch rings could intermittently flash—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, renaming a preset does not automatically update POD Go if the Preset List view is visible—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, selecting a new preset while POD Go is queueing banks can cause the wrong bank to load
  • In POD Go Edit, the EQ icon was incorrect—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, setting Min Value or Max Value can sometimes cause POD Go's inspector to temporarily disappear—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, copying and pasting a block could sometimes not duplicate all snapshot data—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, double-clicking an unavailable effect could cause the Model Category list to disappear—FIXED
  • In POD Go Edit, some HDD configurations could cause the app to crash or display a blank screen—FIXED
  • Lots of other minor bug fixes

 

Known Issues in 1.11

  • On rare occasions, audio can be lost if POD Go is powered on while a connected Mac/PC is passing audio via USB
  • Pitch/Synth > Simple Pitch and Dual Pitch can exhibit subtle artifacts when the Delay parameter is set between 0.4 and 0.7 ms
  • Sending a MIDI CC60 or CC61 message from your computer to control the Looper can sometimes cause POD Go to become unresponsive
  • Sending a MIDI CC68 message followed immediately by a PC message from your computer can sometimes cause POD Go's audio to mute
  • When a block is added from POD Go Edit, footswitches 5 and 6 may not immediately appear as if they're auto-assigned (even though they are)
  • While on the Save screen, holding ACTION and pressing SAVE does not save the preset to Factory > 32D New Preset
  • POD Go does not need a driver to work with your Mac; just plug in and go. However, it is currently limited to a sample rate of 48kHz. Line 6 is working carefully with Apple and will provide a driver that supports sample rates up to 96kHz

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 2 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 4 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 4 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 4 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 97 MB )
Get Download

HX Edit      

HX Edit

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 34 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

 

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

 

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 45 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

 

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

 

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 36 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX Firmware 2.92

Helix/HX 2.92 and Helix Native 1.92 include important bug fixes, and are strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners. Doesn't matter what firmware your Helix/HX product is currently running; you can go straight to 2.92.

 

IMPORTANT! Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don't—and then run to the forums asking why it's not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

 

Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1—Updating HX Edit to 2.92 (assuming you haven't done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com, download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

 

STEP 2—Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.92

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.92 you installed in Step 1 above. If you're not signed in, click "Check for Updates" in the lower right corner and sign in. If you're already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click "Update Now." A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix/HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and/or choose a different destination folder, and then click "Create Backup." IMPORTANT! Note the location where you've saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads "Update Complete" and your Helix/HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click "Back to HX Edit."
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click "Restore from backup..." A dialog appears. Click "Restore Backup" and then "Yes."
  7. Once the restore has finished, turn your Helix/HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads "Helix Control must be updated to work properly." Press Knob 6 (OK).

  

Bug Fixes in 2.92

  • When Global Settings > Footswitches > Stomp Select is set to "Off" or "Press," touch-holding switches could still result in assignment and swap dialogs—FIXED
  • The TAP LED in Helix Floor, Rack/Control, and LT could flash slightly slower than the actual tempo—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, Hotkey commands could display values for HX Preset commands—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, assigning a hold-type HX command could sometimes not engage properly—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch while Global Settings were visible could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • Engaging the MODE switch after selecting a different model during a bank queue could result in unexpected behavior—FIXED
  • In rare cases, bypass and parameter changes made from Helix Floor, Rack, or LT may not be reflected in HX Edit—FIXED
  • On Helix Floor and Helix Control's 1 Switch Looper scribble strip, Undo or Redo text could appear—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX hold-type command could result in an inverted switch state—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, adding an HX Snapshot command could result in the wrong LED color—FIXED
  • In HX Effects' Command Center, engaging a HX Looper > 1/2 Speed or Full speed command could sometimes cause a lockup—FIXED
  • In rare cases on Helix Floor, Rack, or LT, renaming a snapshot could result in a preset change—FIXED
  • The polarity of some amp models was reversed in 2.91—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp could exhibit audible phase cancellation when its Mix parameter is set to 100%—FIXED
  • Dynamics > Rochester Comp now behaves as expected when the Ratio is set lower than 3:1—FIXED
  • In rare cases, scrolling quickly through the model list in HX Edit could cause the hardware to stop responding—FIXED
  • The Looper > 1 Switch Looper LED states would not function properly when controlled via incoming MIDI CCs—FIXED

  

Known Issues in 2.92

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control)
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block's bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix Rack/Control, Helix LT)
  • When using Blue Cat Audio's PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Mavericks, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Helix Native      

Helix Native

Helix/HX 2.91

Helix/HX 2.91 includes important bug fixes, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.

IMPORTANT!

Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don’t — and then run to the forums asking why it’s not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

Updating to 2.91

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1 — Updating HX Edit to 2.90 (assuming you haven’t done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com , download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

STEP 2 — Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.91

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.90 you installed in Step 1 above. If you’re not signed in, click “Check for Updates” in the lower right corner and sign in. If you’re already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click “Update Now.” A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix / HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and / or choose a different destination folder, and then click “Create Backup.” IMPORTANT! Note the location where you’ve saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads “Update Complete” and your Helix / HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click “Back to HX Edit.”
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click “Restore from backup…” A dialog appears. Click “Restore Backup” and then “Yes.”
  7. Turn your Helix / HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads “Helix Control must be updated to work properly.” Press Knob 6 (OK).

Bug Fixes in 2.91

  • Resolves multiple unexpected behavior that can occur when adjusting the Volume knob, entering the Tuner, or other actions during the first 30 seconds after power up—FIXED
  • Engaging the Tap Tempo switch would calculate a different tempo than intended—FIXED
  • When routing Path 1 to Path 2, the Path 2A andor Path 2B input blocks could display clipping even when the signal was not—FIXED/
  • For presets with parallel paths, the Mixer > Merge block boosts signals by 3dB—FIXED

Known Issues in 2.91

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl)/
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block’s bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl, Helix LT)/
  • When using Blue Cat Audio’s PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)
  • The Looper block’s Overdub function does not currently respond to incoming MIDI (HX Stomp)
  • While connected to HX Edit, quickly changing models through the IR block can sometimes result in a unit freeze (HX Stomp)

Compatible OS: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
( 36 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX 2.91

Helix/HX 2.91 includes important bug fixes, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.

IMPORTANT!

Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don’t — and then run to the forums asking why it’s not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

Updating to 2.91

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1 — Updating HX Edit to 2.90 (assuming you haven’t done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com , download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

STEP 2 — Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.91

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.90 you installed in Step 1 above. If you’re not signed in, click “Check for Updates” in the lower right corner and sign in. If you’re already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click “Update Now.” A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix / HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and / or choose a different destination folder, and then click “Create Backup.” IMPORTANT! Note the location where you’ve saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads “Update Complete” and your Helix / HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click “Back to HX Edit.”
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click “Restore from backup…” A dialog appears. Click “Restore Backup” and then “Yes.”
  7. Turn your Helix / HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads “Helix Control must be updated to work properly.” Press Knob 6 (OK).

Bug Fixes in 2.91

  • Resolves multiple unexpected behavior that can occur when adjusting the Volume knob, entering the Tuner, or other actions during the first 30 seconds after power up—FIXED
  • Engaging the Tap Tempo switch would calculate a different tempo than intended—FIXED
  • When routing Path 1 to Path 2, the Path 2A andor Path 2B input blocks could display clipping even when the signal was not—FIXED/
  • For presets with parallel paths, the Mixer > Merge block boosts signals by 3dB—FIXED

Known Issues in 2.91

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl)/
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block’s bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl, Helix LT)/
  • When using Blue Cat Audio’s PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)
  • The Looper block’s Overdub function does not currently respond to incoming MIDI (HX Stomp)
  • While connected to HX Edit, quickly changing models through the IR block can sometimes result in a unit freeze (HX Stomp)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX 2.91

Helix/HX 2.91 includes important bug fixes, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.

IMPORTANT!

Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don’t — and then run to the forums asking why it’s not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

Updating to 2.91

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1 — Updating HX Edit to 2.90 (assuming you haven’t done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com , download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

STEP 2 — Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.91

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.90 you installed in Step 1 above. If you’re not signed in, click “Check for Updates” in the lower right corner and sign in. If you’re already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click “Update Now.” A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix / HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and / or choose a different destination folder, and then click “Create Backup.” IMPORTANT! Note the location where you’ve saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads “Update Complete” and your Helix / HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click “Back to HX Edit.”
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click “Restore from backup…” A dialog appears. Click “Restore Backup” and then “Yes.”
  7. Turn your Helix / HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads “Helix Control must be updated to work properly.” Press Knob 6 (OK).

Bug Fixes in 2.91

  • Resolves multiple unexpected behavior that can occur when adjusting the Volume knob, entering the Tuner, or other actions during the first 30 seconds after power up—FIXED
  • Engaging the Tap Tempo switch would calculate a different tempo than intended—FIXED
  • When routing Path 1 to Path 2, the Path 2A andor Path 2B input blocks could display clipping even when the signal was not—FIXED/
  • For presets with parallel paths, the Mixer > Merge block boosts signals by 3dB—FIXED

Known Issues in 2.91

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl)/
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block’s bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl, Helix LT)/
  • When using Blue Cat Audio’s PatchWork VST host software, resizing the Helix Native window may not scale smoothly (Helix Native)
  • The Looper block’s Overdub function does not currently respond to incoming MIDI (HX Stomp)
  • While connected to HX Edit, quickly changing models through the IR block can sometimes result in a unit freeze (HX Stomp)

Compatible OS: Mac OS X, Windows 7, Windows 8, Mac OS Yosemite, Windows 10, Mac OS El Capitan, macOS Sierra, macOS High Sierra, macOS Mojave, macOS Catalina
( 3 MB )
Get Download

Flash Memory      

 

Helix/HX 2.91

Helix/HX 2.91 includes important bug fixes, and is strongly recommended for all Helix and HX owners.

IMPORTANT!

Carefully read and follow the update instructions below. If you don’t — and then run to the forums asking why it’s not working—the interwebs will make fun of you.

Updating to 2.91

Helix Floor, Helix Rack, Helix LT, HX Effects, HX Stomp

STEP 1 — Updating HX Edit to 2.90 (assuming you haven’t done this already)

  1. Log onto line6.com , download, and install HX Edit 2.90:

STEP 2 — Updating Helix/HX Firmware to 2.91

  1. If you have Helix Rack/Control, turn off Helix Control. Also, shut down all Line 6 software or any programs that use audio, like DAWs, iTunes, Spotify, video games, etc.
  2. Connect your Helix/HX device to a Mac or PC via USB (do not use any sort of USB hub, which may include the front USB ports on towers) and turn it on.
  3. Launch the new version of HX Edit 2.90 you installed in Step 1 above. If you’re not signed in, click “Check for Updates” in the lower right corner and sign in. If you’re already signed in, a dialog panel appears, indicating an update is available.
  4. Click “Update Now.” A window appears, asking you to back up your Helix / HX hardware. Click OK, optionally rename the backup and / or choose a different destination folder, and then click “Create Backup.” IMPORTANT! Note the location where you’ve saved the backup.
  5. Continue following the prompts. Once updated, the window reads “Update Complete” and your Helix / HX hardware begins rebuilding its presets; wait for this to complete and click “Back to HX Edit.”
  6. From the File pull-down menu, click “Restore from backup…” A dialog appears. Click “Restore Backup” and then “Yes.”
  7. Turn your Helix / HX product off and then on again.
  8. If you have Helix Control connected to Helix Rack, turn on Helix Control. Helix Rack reads “Helix Control must be updated to work properly.” Press Knob 6 (OK).

Bug Fixes in 2.91

  • Resolves multiple unexpected behavior that can occur when adjusting the Volume knob, entering the Tuner, or other actions during the first 30 seconds after power up—FIXED
  • Engaging the Tap Tempo switch would calculate a different tempo than intended—FIXED
  • When routing Path 1 to Path 2, the Path 2A andor Path 2B input blocks could display clipping even when the signal was not—FIXED/
  • For presets with parallel paths, the Mixer > Merge block boosts signals by 3dB—FIXED

Known Issues in 2.91

  • A slight thump can be heard when loading a Distortion > Kinky Boost, Arbitrator Fuzz, or Tycoctavia Fuzz model
  • While backing up, the scribble strip on FS8 can sometimes flicker (Helix Floor, Helix RackControl)/
  • In very rare cases, leaving the unit on for many hours can sometimes cause reverb models to cease outputting audio
  • In a preset with two IRs blocks, moving one IR block to Path B can sometimes cause the other IR block to reset its Impulse Response to slot 1
  • In rare cases, after exporting and then importing presets using HX Edit, the Split block’s bypass state can sometimes change (Helix Floor, Helix RackContr